KF300 22_KF300_Arab cover_1.0_0822.ind1 1 P/N : MMBB0222269(1.0) KF300 KF300 USER GUIDE 2008.8.
Bluetooth QD ID B013568 22_KF300_Arab cover_1.0_0822.ind2 2 2008.8.
KF300 U S E R G U I D E - English Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider. F300_Arab_E_0822_쪼.indd 1 2008.8.
Table of Contents Table of Contents Introduction 6 For Your Safety 7 Guidelines for safe and efficient use 8 KF300 features 13 Parts of the phone Display Information On-Screen Icons 17 Getting started 19 Inserting the SIM card and the handset battery Charging the Battery 20 Disconnecting the adapter 21 How to use a microSD memory card 22 General Functions 26 Making and answering calls Entering text 28 Selecting functions and options 32 In-call menu 33 Menu Tree 36 Games & Apps 38 Games Applica
Multimedia Templates All songs My playlist Settings 45 Text templates Multimedia templates Camera Video camera FM Radio Voice recorder 46 48 49 50 Messaging 51 New message Message E-mail 52 Inbox Email box Drafts Outbox Sent Listen to voicemail Info message 54 55 56 57 58 Settings 59 Text message Multimedia message E-mail Voicemail number Service message Info message 61 62 My stuff 64 Images Sounds Videos Others External memory 65 66 67 Profiles 68 Table of Contents 44 MP3 player
Table of Contents Contacts 70 Table of Contents Search New contact Speed dials Groups Copy all Delete all Settings 71 72 73 View options Information Service dial number Own number My business card Tools 74 Alarm clock Calculator Stopwatch Unit converter World clock SIM services 75 WAP 76 Home Bookmarks Enter address History Saved pages Settings 77 Network profiles Rendering mode Cache Cookies Security certificates Show image Java script 78 79 Information Connectivity 80 Bluetooth Netwo
Settings 86 Set date Date format Set time Time format Auto update Languages Display Wallpaper Clocks Backlight timer Brightness 87 Home screen shortcut Font size Theme Menu style Dialling Standby text Network name Call waiting Minute minder Auto redial Send DTMF tones 91 Security 92 PIN code request Phone lock Anti theft mobile tracker Change codes 93 Table of Contents Date & Time Flight mode Power save Reset Memory status Accessories Technical data 94 95 Shortcut Call Call divert Call barr
Introduction Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact KF300 mobile phone, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology. This user’s guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage or misuse of the phone. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this user’s guide could void your warranty for this equipment.
For Your Safety CAUTION! • Mobile Phones must be switched off at all times in aircrafts. • Switch off the phone in any area where required by special regulations. For example, do not use your phone in hospitals or it may affect sensitive medical equipment. • Do not hold the phone in your hand while driving. • Do not use your phone near petrol stations, fuel depots, chemical plants or blasting operations. • For your safety, use ONLY specified ORIGINAL batteries and chargers.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Exposure to radio frequency energy Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information This mobile phone model KF300 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves.
WARNING Only use batteries, chargers and accessories approved for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. v Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualifi ed service technician when repair work is required. v Keep away from electrical appliances such as TVs, radios, and personal computers. v The unit should be kept away from heat sources such as radiators or cookers. v Do not drop.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Guidelines for safe and efficient use Efficient phone operation Electronics devices All mobile phones may get interference, which could affect performance. v Do not use your mobile phone near medical equipment without requesting permission. Avoid placing the phone over pacemakers, for example in your breast pocket. v Some hearing aids might be disturbed by mobile phones. v Minor interference may affect TVs, radios, PCs, etc.
In aircraft Blasting area v Do not use it on the ground without Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. Children Potentially explosive atmospheres Keep the phone in a safe place out of the reach of small children. It includes small parts which may cause a choking hazard if detached. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. v Turn your mobile phone off before boarding any aircraft.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Guidelines for safe and efficient use Battery information and care v Do not expose the battery charger v You do not need to completely v Do not leave the battery in hot or discharge the battery before recharging. Unlike other battery systems, there is no memory effect that could compromise the battery’s performance. v Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximize the battery life.
KF300 features KF300 features Parts of the phone 1. Earpiece 2. Main LCD 1 3. Send key v Dials a phone number and answers a call. v I n standby mode: Shows the history of calls. 2 4. Alpha numeric keys v I n standby mode: Input numbers to dial Hold down 0 – International calls 1 – Activate Voice mail centre menu 2 to 9 – Speed dials v I n editing mode: Enter numbers & characters 3 5 5. Clear key v Clears a character with each press. Hold the key down to clear all input. 4 6.
KF300 features KF300 features 1 2 3 1. Alarm Hot key v Go to Alarm Menu 2. Schdeule Hot key v Go to Schedule Menu 3. Message Hotkey v Go to Message menu 4. Favorites Hot key v Go to Favorites Menu 6 5 4 5. Navigation key v I n standby mode: U Briefly: View images D Briefly: Go to Contacts list L Briefly: Go to Profiles Menu R Briefly: Go to MP3 Player Menu Note The navigation key options can be changed by user using the shortcut option in settings. v I n menu: Scroll up & down 6.
v I n standby mode (closed): 1 Show Date & Time by turns vD uring a call: Earpiece volume KF300 features F300_Arab_E_0822_쪼.indd 1. Side keys v I n standby mode (opened): Keypad tones volume adjustment adjustment 2 vD uring playing MP3 music: Audio volume adjustment 2. H eadset/Charger/USB cable connector Note 3 4 Please ensure phone is powered on and in idle mode before connecting the USB cable. 3. Camera lens 4. Sub LCD 15 15 2008.8.
KF300 features KF300 features Battery pack Battery cover SIM card socket microSD card slot 16 F300_Arab_E_0822_쪼.indd 16 2008.8.
Icon area Text and graphic area Soft key indications Area Description First line Displays various icons. Middle lines Displays messages, instructions and any information that you enter, such as number to be dialled. Last line Shows the functions currently assigned to the two soft keys. F300_Arab_E_0822_쪼.indd On-Screen Icons The screen displays several icons. There are described below. Icon Description Indicates the strength of the network signal.
KF300 features KF300 features Icon Description Icon Description Indicates that GPRS service is available. Indicates that external memory is installed. Indicates that flight mode has been activated. You have received a message. Indicates that a call is in progress. You have received a voice mail. All calls are diverted. General menu in profile. Indicates that the phone is accessing the WAP. Silent menu in profile. Indicates that you are using GPRS. Vibrate only menu in profile.
Getting started 2. Remove the battery. Hold the top edge of the battery and lift the battery from the battery compartment. Make sure the power is off before you remove the battery. 1. Remove the battery cover. Press the battery release latch and slide the battery cover toward the bottom of the phone. And remove the battery cover. Note Removing the battery from the phone when the power is on may cause the phone to malfunction. F300_Arab_E_0822_쪼.indd 3. Inserting the SIM card.
Getting started Caution! Getting star ted The metal contact of the SIM card can be easily damaged by scratches. Pay special attention to the SIM card while handling. Follow the instructions supplied with the SIM card. 4. Inserting the battery. Inserting the bottom of the battery first into the bottom edge of the battery compartment. Push down the top of the battery until it snaps into space. 5. Replace the battery cover. Lay the battery cover in place of the phone and slide it until the latch clicks.
Disconnecting the adapter 3. The moving bars of battery icon will stop after charging is complete. 1. When charging is finished, the moving bars of the battery icon stop and ‘Battery Full unplug the charger’ is displayed on the screen. Caution! • Do not force the connector as this may damage the phone and/or the travel adapter. • Installing the battery pack charger vertically to wall power outlet.
Getting started Getting star ted Note v Ensure the battery is fully charged before using the phone for the first time. v Do not remove the battery or SIM card while charging. v In the case the battery is not properly charged, please turn the phone off and on using the power key, then recharge the battery. After detaching and reattaching the battery, please recharge the battery. How to use a microSD memory card < How to install a microSD memory card> 1. Turn the phone off.
v Do not bend the card or force it into the slot. v Do not insert any memory cards other than those made by microSD. v If the microSD has been formatted Getting star ted Note using FAT32, format the microSD using FAT16 again. 4. Close the slot protection. v After you insert microSD card into 5. To remove the memory card, turn the phone off. Open the slot protection and carefully extract the memory card.
Getting started Getting star ted Memory card formatting Turning your handset off Before you start to use the memory card you have to format it. After you insert the memory card, select Menu o Settings o Memory status o External memory, then press the OK key. Press and hold the end key until the power goes off. There may be a few seconds delay while the handset powers down. Do not turn the handset on again during this time.
PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits) The PIN2 code, supplied with some SIM cards, is required to access functions such as advice of Call costs and Fixed dial number. These functions are only available if supported by your SIM card. Check with your network for further information. PUK code (4 to 8 digits) The PUK (PIN Unblocking Key) code is required to change a blocked PIN code. The PUK code may be supplied with the SIM card. If not, contact your network operator for the code.
General Functions General Functions Making and answering calls Making a call 1. Make sure your phone is powered on. 2. Enter a phone number including the area code. Making an international call 1. Press and hold the 0 key for the international prefix. The ‘+’ character automatically selects the international access code. 2. Enter the country code, area code, and the phone number. 3. Press the s key. v Press and hold the c key to erase Ending a call 3. Press the s key to make the call.
Answering a call 1. To answer an incoming call, open the phone when Flip open has been set as the answer mode. You can change the answer mode what you want by using the Answer mode feature. Note If the Any key has been set as the answer mode, any key press will answer a call except for the e end , right soft key and the side volume keys. v To reject an incoming call in the Silent mode, press and hold side down key on the left side of the phone without opening the phone. F300_Arab_E_0822_쪼.
General Functions General Functions Entering text You can enter alphanumeric characters by using the phone’s keypad. For example, storing names in the contacts, writing a message, creating a personal greeting. The following text input methods are available in the phone. T9 (T9 Abc) mode This mode lets you enter words with only one keystroke per letter. Each key on the keypad has more than one letter.
1. When you are in a field that allows characters to be entered, you will notice the text input mode indicator in the upper right corner of the LCD screen. 2. Change the text input mode by pressing the # key. You can check the current text input mode in the lower right corner of the LCD screen. Using the T9 mode The T9 predictive text input mode lets you enter words easily with a minimum number of key presses.
General Functions General Functions 2. Enter the whole word before editing or deleting any keystrokes. 3. Complete each word with a space by pressing the key 0 or l key. To delete letters, press c. Press and hold down c to erase the letters continuously. Using the ABC mode Use the 2 to 9 keys to enter your text. 1. Press the key labelled with the required letter: v Once for the first letter v Twice for the second letter v And so on 2. To insert a space, press the right navigation key R once.
Using the symbol mode The characters assigned to the keys and their order of appearance depends on the language selected using the option Input method. The table above provides the characters set for English language. Using the 123 (Number) mode The symbol mode enables you to enter various symbols or special characters. To enter a symbol, select Options o Insert o Symbol. Use the navigation and numeric keys to select the desired symbol and press the OK key.
Selecting functions and options Selecting functions and options Your phone offers a set of functions that allow you to customise the phone. These functions are arranged in menus and sub-menus, accessed via the two soft keys marked. Each menu and sub-menu lets you view and alter the settings of a particular function. Menu Contacts The roles of the soft keys vary according to the current context; the label on the bottom line of the screen just above each key indicates its current role.
In-call menu During a call The menu displayed on the handset screen during a call is different than the default main menu displayed when in idle screen, and the options are described below. Making a Second Call Answering an Incoming Call To answer an incoming call when the handset is ringing, simply press the s key. The handset is also able to warn you of an incoming call while you are already on a call. A tone sounds in the earpiece, and the display will show that a second call is waiting.
In-call menu Muting the Microphone In-call menu You can mute the microphone during a call by pressing the right soft key [Mute]. The handset can be unmuted by pressing the right soft key [Unmute]. When the handset is muted, the caller cannot hear you, but you can still hear them. DTMF tones while calling To switch on DTMF tones while calling (e.g. to use the phone with an automatic switchboard) press the left soft key [Options] followed by Enable DTMF. Select Disable DTMF to disable DTMF tones.
Setting Up a Conference Call Activate the Conference Call on Hold To activate a conference call on hold, press the s key. Alternatively press the left soft key [Options] and select Join all/Hold all calls. Other users on hold will stay connected. To return to conference call mode, press the left soft key [Options] followed by Conference call.
Menu Tree Menu Tree The menu in this phone can be displayed in 2 ways. The menu in this phone can be displayed in either Grid view or List View. Please note that menu number options are different in each view. The default setting on the phone is set to show the menu in grid view, so therefore all the menu number selections throughout the manual are shown according to that setting. You can go to the desired menu using the left soft key [Menu], navigation keys and the OK key.
8. Contacts *. wap 6.1 Images 8.1 Search *.1 Home 6.2 Sounds 8.2 New contact *.2 Bookmarks 6.3 Videos 8.3 Speed dials *.3 Enter address 6.4 Others 8.4 Groups *.4 History 6.5 External memory 8.5 Copy all *.5 Saved pages 8.6 Delete all 8.7 Settings 8.8 Information 7. Profiles *.6 Settings *.7 Information 0. Connectivity 0.1 Bluetooth 7.1 General 0.2 Network 7.2 Silent 7.3 Vibrate only 9. Tools 0.3 USB connection mode 7.4 Outdoor 9.1 Alarm clock 9.2 Calculator #. Settings 7.
Games & Apps Games & Apps Games Menu 1.1 You can access a great selection of games on your phone. Note Java™ is a technology developed by Sun Microsystems. There are two methods to install Java Applet. The first method, Similar to the way you would download the Java Applet using the standard MS Internet Explorer browsers, Java MIDlet can be downloaded using the WAP enabled phone. Depending on the service provider, all Java based programs such as Java games can be downloaded and run on a phone.
Network profiles Menu 1.3 Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition) based programs will run in a phone environment. The J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition) based programs will only run in a PC environment. Network profiles menu allows you to see the network information used to connect to the Internet. You can activate or add new profiles. Applications Games & Apps Caution Menu 1.2 When Applications menu is selected, Java loading screen is displayed. You can select and easily access other applications in this menu.
Call history Call histor y You can check the record of missed, received, and Last dialled calls only if the network supports the Calling Line Identification (CLI) within the service area. Dialled calls The number and name (if available) are displayed together with the date and time at which the call was made. You can also view the number of times you have called. Received calls All calls Call duration Menu 2.1 You can view all lists of outgoing, incoming and missed calls. Missed calls Menu 2.
vD ialed calls: Length of the v Auto display: This network service vR eceived calls: Length of the incoming calls. Call costs Menu 2.6 Allows you to check the cost of your last call and all calls. To check Cost settings, you should check the following menus. vS et credit: This network service allows you to limit the cost of your calls by selected charging units. If you select Read, the number of remaining unit is shown. If you select Change, you can change your change limit.
Organizer Organizer Calendar Menu 3.1 You can refer to your schedule by months. The cursor is on the current date, and the registered date is marked. Each press of vA ll schedules: You can view all schedules. vG o to date: You can go the chosen date directly. vD elete old: Select this to delete the expired schedule notes that you have already been notified of. 1 skips back a year. 3 skips forward a year. 5 moves to today. * skips back a month. Memo # skips forward a month.
If you want to change the text input mode, press the # key. To do Menu 3.4 You can set the configurations to view the calendar. Organizer Calendar settings Note Menu 3.3 You can view, edit and add tasks to do. Tasks are displayed in time order. Tasks that have been completed or not completed are displayed in different ways. 1. If the entry is empty, press the left soft key [New]. 2. Input the Due date, Note, Priority, and Status. 3.
Multimedia Multimedia MP3 player Menu 4.1 The KF300 has an integrated MP3 player built-in. You can enjoy listening to MP3 music files on your phone using a compatible headset or via the internal loudspeaker.
v Equalizer: This menu helps you to v You should copy MP3 to Sounds/ MP3 folder. If you copy another folder, you can’t see MP3 files. v The PC should run Windows 98 SE, Windows ME, Windows 2000, Windows XP operating system. All songs (Menu 4.1.1) You can see all of the music files. My playlist (Menu 4.1.2) You can set the music files of your taste. Settings (Menu 4.1.3) adjust various of environment on listening to the music.
Multimedia Multimedia Camera Menu 4.2 Using the camera module built in your phone, you can take pictures of people. Additionally, you can send photos to other people and select photos as wallpaper. Note When using the camera, power consumption increases. If the battery is too low, you may not be able to use the Camera feature, please recharge the battery before use. • To take a picture - To take clear pictures, press the camera C key while holding the camera without any movement.
vS elf timer: Allows you to select the vV iew option: You can set the view mode. (Full image/Full screen) vS ave to: You can set the save option for a picture. (Phone/External) vM ulti shot: allows you to take multishot‑photos successively. vE ffects: 4 settings are available. (Off/Sepia/Mono/Negative) vW hite balance: Allows you to change the settings according to the enviroment.
Multimedia Multimedia Video camera Menu 4.3 You can record and save a video clip. 1. To start recording press the OK key. As soon as it starts to record a timer will be displayed. before recording a video clip, you can set the following options by pressing the left soft key [Options]. vV ideo mode: Allows you to send video file through MMS or General. vR esolution: Allows you to set the size. (176x144/320x240) vQ uality: Allows you to set the image quality from Normal, Fine and Super fine.
v New video: You can record a new vP lay: You can play the recorded video clip. vS end via: You can send the photo via Multimedia message/ Bluetooth/Email. vA lbum: You can access the Videos folder of My stuff. FM Radio Menu 4.4 v Edit channel: You can adjust frequency and change the radio station in the selected channel. You can change the frequency with Left/Right navigation keys and number keys. Multimedia video.
Multimedia Multimedia Voice recorder Menu 4.5 You can record a voice memo. 1. Press the OK key to start recording. Once recording is started, the message “REC” and the recording time are displayed, talk into the microphone. 2. If you want to finish recording, press the right soft key [Stop]. The recorded file is automatically saved in Sounds folder of My stuff. vN ew voice record: You can start a new voice recording. vP lay: You can play the recorded voice memo.
Messaging Menu 5.1 This menu includes functions related to SMS (Short Message Service), MMS (Multimedia Message Service), Email, as well as the network’s service messages. Message (Menu 5.1.1) Options vS end to: Sends messages. 1. Enter numbers of recipient. 2. Press the down navigation key to add more recipients. 3. You can add phone numbers in the contacts. 4. Press the left soft key [Options] and then select Send after entering numbers. The message will automatically be saved in the Sent folder.
Messaging vM ore: Select this to add a Contact, a Messaging My Business card, Schedule, Memo and To do. vS ave to vW riting language: Select the language for T9 input mode. vC lear text: You can clear text while writing SMS. - Draft: Stores Messages in Drafts. - Multimedia template: Stores Message in Multimedia template. vP review: (Dynamic menu)You can preview multimedia messages you have created. vV iew attachment: ( Dynamic menu) you can see attachment lists.
vS end to: Enter the e-mail address or select the e-mail address from the contacts. v I nsert: You can add Symbol/Text template/Name & Number. vA ttachments: You can add the following: Image/Video/Sound/ New photo/New video/New voice record/Contact/My business card/ Schedule/Memo/To do/Others. vS ave to drafts: Select this to save the message in the Drafts. vE dit subject: You can edit the subject.
Messaging Messaging Note ❈ SIM message v Enter the reference e-mail address SIM message means the message exceptionally stored in SIM card. to forward the e-mail in Cc (Carbon copy) field. v Enter a hidden reference e-mail For notified multimedia message, you have to wait for downloading and processing of the message. v Only valid e-mail addresses are To read a message, select one of the messages by pressing the left soft key [Options].
v I nformation: You can view vM ulti delete: After selecting the messages you want to remove, you can delete the selected messages. vD elete all read: You can delete all messages read. vD elete all: You can delete all messages. Menu 5.4 Using this menu, you can preset multimedia messages that you use most frequently. This menu shows the preset multimedia message list. The following options are available. vV iew: You can see the multimedia messages. vE dit: Modifies the message you choose.
Messaging Messaging Outbox Menu 5.5 Sent Menu 5.6 You can view the list and contents of sending/resending/waiting/send fail in this menu and can also verify if the transmission was successful. This menu allows you to view the messages which are already sent. You can check the time and the contents of message. After sending the message successfully, the message will be moved to sent box. Listen to voicemail The following options are available.
When you receive a voicemail, your phone displays the icon and you hear an alert. Please check with your network provider for details of their service in order to configure the handset correctly. Info message Menu 5.8 (Dependent to network and subscription) Info service messages are text messages delivered by the network to GSM. They provide general information such as weather reports, traffic news, taxis, pharmacies, and stock prices.
Messaging Messaging Templates Menu 5.9 Text templates (Menu 5.9.1) You have 6 text templates as below; • Please, call me back . • I’m late. I will be there at • Where are you now? • I am on the way. • Urgent! Please, contact • I love you! The following options are available. vV iew: You can see selected templates. vE dit: Use this to write a new message or edit the selected template message from the text template list.
vD elete: Deletes the multimedia vN ew template: Use this to create a new template. vD elete all: Allows you to delete all multimedia messages. Settings Menu 5.0 Text message (Menu 5.0.1) vM essage types: Text, Voice, Fax, Paging, X.400, Email, ERMES Usually, the type of message is set to Text. You can convert your text into alternative formats. Contact your service provider for the availability of this function.
Messaging vD elivery reports: You can set Messaging ON/OFF in these menus. - Request report: Request reports to check out whether your messages are sent to the recipients successfully. - Allow report: When the senders request delivery reports, you can decide the report to be delivered or not. vR ead report: You can set ON/OFF in these menus.
E-mail (Menu 5.0.3) E-mail accounts (Menu 5.0.3.1) 1. Select New from the Email account menu options. 2. The following items need to be configured. - Account name: You can edit the e-mail account name. - E-mail address: Enter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. - My name: Enter a user name. - Incoming mail server: Enter the POP3 or IMAP4 address that receives your e-mail. -O utgoing mail server: Allows you to enter the SMTP address.
Messaging Messaging -A POP secure login: Decide whether to activate APOP secure login or not. When the mailbox type is IMAP4, APOP secure login is always set to OFF. Retrieve interval (Menu 5.0.3.3) -M aximum receive size: Set up the size of files that can receive. (50KB/100KB/200KB/300KB) You can make your signature. - Save to server: Select On to save the email on the server. - Insert signature: Select On to add your signature to your email messages.
Info message (Menu 5.0.6) -O n: If you select this menu, your phone will receive Info service messages. Messaging vR eceive - Off: If you select this menu, your phone will not receive Info service messages any more. vA lerts -O n: Your phone will beep when you have received Info service message numbers. - Off: Your phone will not beep even though you have received info service messages. vL anguages You can select the language you want by pressing the OK key.
My stuff My stuff Images Menu 6.1 The Images folder consists of embedded links for downloading pictures through the internet and default images. To view the image in details, press the OK key. When a file is selected, the following options will be displayed by pressing the left soft key [Options]. vV iew: You can see the selected file. vD elete: Delete a selected file. vS et as -W allpaper: Currently selected image can be set as a Wallpaper.
vP rint via Bluetooth: Most pictures vS lide show: You can view a slide show of the files you stored. vN ew folder: You can create a new folder. vM ulti delete: You can remove a Sounds Menu 6.2 When a file is selected, the following options will be displayed by pressing the left soft key [Options]. My stuff that you have taken in the camera mode and downloaded through WAP can be transmitted via Bluetooth to a printer. vP lay: You can play the selected file.
My stuff vS end via: Send the selected file to My stuff another device via MMS, Bluetooth ,or Email. vF ile vN ew folder: You can create a new folder. vM ulti delete: You can remove a number of files you selected. -R ename: Changes the file name of the selected file. - Move to folder: Move the selected file to the folder. - Move to external memory / Move to phone memory: Move the selected file to the external memory (if inserted) or multimedia memory in your phone.
vF ile v New folder: You can create a new v Multi delete: You can remove a Warning! v Delete all: Delete all files in the list. You can‘t use the following characters: \ / : * ? < > | v Sort by: You can arrange the files as -M ove to folder: Move the selected file to the folder. Others number of files you selected. Date, Type and Name . Menu 6.4 - Move to external memory / Move to phone memory: Move the selected file to the external memory (if inserted) or multimedia memory in your phone.
Profiles Profiles In Profiles, you can adjust and customise the phone tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. There are five preset profiles: General, Silent, Vibrate only, Outdoor and Headset. Each profile can be personalised (Except Vibrate only & Silent profiles). Press the left soft key [Menu] and select Profiles using up/down navigation keys. Activate (Menu 7.X.1) 1. A list of profiles is displayed. Personalize (Menu 7.X.
vK eypad tones: Select the desired keypad tone. Profiles keypad tone. vK eypad volume: Set the volume of vF lip tones: Allows to set the flip tone for adjusting environment. vE ffect sound volume: Set the volume of effect sound. vP ower on/off volume: Set the volume of the ringing tone when switching the phone on/off. Note All profiles cannot be renamed. F300_Arab_E_0822_쪼.indd 69 69 2008.8.
Contacts Contacts Search Menu 8.1 1. Select Search and enter the name that you want to search. vN ew message: After you have found the number you want, you can send a Message to the selected number. vS end via: You can send the data Note v You can access the Contacts directly by pressing the right soft key [Contacts] in standby mode. v Instant searching is available by inputting the initial letter of the name. 2.
Menu 8.2 You can add or save a new contact. You can enter the name, different phone numbers and email addresses of a new contact. You can also assign the contact to groups, include a picture, assign a specific ringtone and enter the anniversary for the contact. You can enter and manage contact addresses depending on the memory usage. Note v The contact entry fields may differ when you add or save a contact in the SIM address in the SIM. v Maximum stored name and number length depends on SIM card type.
Contacts Contacts Groups Menu 8.4 You can list up to the members per each group. In the handset memory, there are 7 default groups: Family, Friends, Colleagues, VIP, Group 1, Group 2, and Group 3. Select the group name that you want to manage by pressing the left soft key [Option]. The following submenus will be displayed. vV iew members: Shows the group vR ename: You can change a group name. vR eset all: Allows you to reset all contacts. Copy all Menu 8.
Menu 8.7 (SIM dependent) View options (Menu 8.7.1) You can set the contact display option. vN ame only: Set the contact information with only name. vN ame & Number: Set the contact information with name and number. vW ith picture: Set the contact information with picture. Information Own number (Menu 8.8.2) You can save and check your own number in SIM card. Contacts Settings My business card (Menu 8.8.
Tools Tools Alarm clock Menu 9.1 You can set the alarm clock to go on at a specified time. 1. If there is no alarm, press the left soft key [New] to add a new alarm. 2. Set or cancel the alarm using the options for specifying whether the alarm is on or by choosing the alarm time. 3. Select the repeat period: Once, Daily, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun, sat~wed, sat~thu, sun~thu 4. Select the alarm tone by using Options o Sounds.
Menu 9.3 This menu allows you to record the elapsed time of an event. 1. Press the left soft key [Start] to take time and record the lap time by pressing the right soft key [Lap]. 2. Press the left soft key [Stop] to ascertain the record of lap time. World clock Menu 9.5 The World clock function provides time information on major cities worldwide. You can select the following options by pressing the left soft key [Options]. vC hange time zone: You can change the time zone by selecting city. 3.
WAP WAP You can access various WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) services such as banking, news, weather reports and flight information. These services are specially designed for mobile phones and they are maintained by WAP service providers. Check the availability of WAP services, pricing and tariffs with your network operator or the service provider whose service you wish to use. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. Once connected, the homepage is displayed.
Menu *.1 Connects to a homepage. The homepage will be the site which is defined in the activated profile. It will be defined by the service provider if you have not defined it in the activated profile. Bookmarks v View: You can see the selected bookmark. v Edit: You can edit the selected WAP Home bookmark. v Delete: You can delete the selected bookmark. v New bookmark: Select this to create a new bookmark. Menu *.
WAP WAP Enter address Menu *.3 You can connect directly to the site you want. After entering a specific URL, press the left soft key [Options] and select the Connect. History Menu *.4 This menu shows the recently browsed pages. Saved pages Menu *.5 Network profiles (Menu *.6.1) A profile is the network information used to connect to the Internet. There are default profiles for some operators, stored in phone memory. It s impossible to rename default profiles.
Security certificates (Menu *.6.5) You can adjust the size of URL page when the page is larger than phone screen. You can see the list of personal certificates that have been stored in your phone. Cache (Menu *.6.3) Show image (Menu *.6.6) The information or services you have accessed are saved in the cache memory of the phone. You can select to display image or not during WAP browsing. Note A cache is a buffer memory, which is used to save data temporarily. Cookies (Menu *.6.
Connectivity Connectivity Bluetooth Menu 0.1 Bluetooth enables compatible mobile devices, peripherals and computers that are in close proximity to communicate directly with each other without wires. This handset supports built-in Bluetooth connectivity, which makes it possible to connect it. With compatible Bluetooth headsets, computer applications and so on. Note v If you use LG PC Sync via Bluetooth, you can exchange the data only within Contacts.
vB luetooth on/off vD evice list You can view all devices which your KF300 is already paired to. If you enter Paired devices, you access the options -C onnect /Disconnect: After pairing with headset or stereo headset, you should connect with those devices. Then you can use those devices. - New: Allows to search new Bluetooth devices and add them to your phone’s list of paired devices. When you select New your handset will start to search for Bluetooth devices within range.
Connectivity Connectivity -R ename: Allows you to change the name of the paired Bluetooth device and how it is displayed on the handset. - Delete all: Allows to delete all the paired Bluetooth devices. vB luetooth settings -M y visibility: This indicates whether or not your handset will be visible to other Bluetooth devices. - My name: You can set the name of Bluetooth device. The default name is LG KF300. - My address: You can view the address of your Bluetooth device. Network Menu 0.
vP referred: You can set a list of GPRS attach (Menu 0.2.2) You can set GPRS service depending on various situations. v Power on If you select this menu, the GPRS connection is established when you connect a WAP or application service and closed when you end the WAP or applicaion connection. Access Point (Menu 0.2.3) v View: You can see the selected profile. v Edit: You can edit the selected profile.
Connectivity Connectivity Appears only if you select Data Settings as a Bearer/service. - Primary server: Input the IP address of the primary DNS server you access. - Dial number: Enter the telephone number to dial to access your WAP gateway. - Secondary Server: Input the IP address of the secondary DNS server you access. - User ID: The users identity for your dial-up server (and NOT the WAP gateway). The service settings are only available when GPRS is chosen as a bearer service.
Menu 0.3 You can choose one mode of Data service and USB Mass storage. vM ass storage You can connect your phone to your PC, as a USB storage device, using the cable in three ways. 1. Connect the phone to the PC when the idle screen is displayed. 2. Connect the phone while it is performing an operation or menu function, and then move to the idle screen. 3. Connect the phone while it is performing an operation or menu function, and then select the USB Mass Storage menu. F300_Arab_E_0822_쪼.
Settings Settings Date & Time Menu #.1 You can set functions relating to the date and time. Set date (Menu #.1.1) You can enter the current date. Date format (Menu #.1.2) Languages Menu #.2 You can change the language for the display texts in your phone. This change will also affect the language Input mode. Display Menu #.3 You can set the Date format such as YYYY/MM/DD, DD/MM/YYYY, MM/ DD/YYYY. (D: Day / M: Month / Y: Year) Wallpaper (Menu #.3.1) Set time (Menu #.1.3) Clocks (Menu #.3.
Dialling (Menu #.3.9) You can set the brightness of LCD. You can set the font style/font size of the numbers which appear in the home screen when you make a call. Home screen shortcut (Menu #.3.5) If you select on, functionality of 4 navigation keys will be displayed on idle screen. Standby text (Menu #.3.0) If you select On, you can edit the text which is displayed in standby mode. Font size (Menu #.3.6) Network name (Menu #.3.*) You can change the font size for display text in your phone.
Settings Settings Call divert (Menu #.5.1) The submenus The Call divert service allows you to divert incoming voice calls, fax calls, and data calls to another number. For details, contact your service provider. Call divert menus have the submenus shown below. vA ll voice calls: Diverts voice calls unconditionally. v I f busy: Diverts voice calls when the phone is in use. v I f no reply: Diverts voice calls which you do not answer.
v Incoming when abroad The Call barring service prevents your phone from making or receiving certain category of calls. This function requires the call barring password. You can view the following submenus. v Cancel all barrings vA ll outgoing The barring service for all outgoing calls. vO utgoing international The barring service for all outgoing international calls.
Settings Settings Fixed dial number (Menu #.5.3) Answer mode (Menu #.5.4) (SIM dependent) vF lip open: If you select this menu, v You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers. The numbers are protected by your PIN2 code. vO n You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers. vO ff You can cancel fixed dialling function. vN umber list You can view the number list saved as Fixed dial number you can receive an incoming call when you open the flip.
vO ff: Your phone number will not Auto redial (Menu #.5.8) v On: When this function is activated, Call waiting (Menu #.5.6) (network dependent) vA ctivate: If you select Activate, you can accept a waiting (receiving) call. vC ancel: If you select Cancel, you cannot recognize the waiting (receiving) call. vV iew status: Shows the status of Call waiting. Minute minder (Menu #.5.7) the phone will automatically try to redial in the case of failure to connect a call. Settings be shown.
Settings Settings Security Menu #.6 PIN code request (Menu #.6.1) In this menu, you can set the phone to ask for the PIN code of your SIM card when the phone is switched on. If this function is activated, you ll be requested to enter the PIN code. 1. Select PIN code request in the security settings menu, and then press the left soft key [OK]. 2. Set On/Off. 3. If you want to change the setting, you need to enter PIN code when you switch on the phone. 4.
Change codes (Menu #.6.4) You can change the access codes: PIN2 code, ATMT code. 1. If you want to change the Security code/PIN2 code/ATMT Code, input your original code, and then press the left soft key [OK]. 2. Input new Security code/PIN2 code/ATMT code and verify them. Flight mode Menu #.7 This allows you to use only the phone features that do not require the use of the wireless network when you are in an airplane or in places where the wireless network is prevented.
Accessories Accessories There are various accessories for your mobile phone. You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements. Standard Battery Travel Adapter This charger allows you to charge the battery while away from home or your office. Hands free earmicrophone Note v Always use genuine LG accessories. v Failure to do so may invalidate your warranty.
Technical data General System: E-GSM 900/DCS 1800/ PCS 1900 Ambient Temperatures Max: +55°C (discharging) +45°C (charging) Technical data Product name: KF300 Min: -10°C F300_Arab_E_0822_쪼.indd 95 95 2008.8.
F300_Arab_E_0822_쪼.indd 96 2008.8.
00-120 memo.indd 3 Memo 2007.6.
Memo 00-120 memo.indd 2 2007.6.
00-120 memo.indd 3 Memo 2007.6.
Memo 00-120 memo.indd 2 2007.6.
F300_Arab_0825_ .indd 92 2008.8.
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡE-GSM 900/DCS 1800/ PCS 1900 : ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞKF300 : ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﶈﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ +55 :ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ( +45ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺷﺤﻦ( ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ -10 :ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ 91 2008.8.25 10:27:47 AM .
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ. ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ LGﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ. xﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ. xﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ: ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. 90 2008.8.
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﻜﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. xﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ( ،ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. xﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ :ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 6.# ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ) PINﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1.6.# ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺭﻣﺰ PINﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﹼ ﻣﻨﺸﻄﺔ ،ﻓﺴﺘﹸﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ .PIN .1ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ “PINﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[. .2ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ. .3ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ،ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ PINﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. .
ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (6.5.# xﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ )ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ(. xﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. ﻣﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (7.5.# ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( xﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ )ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ(. ﻣﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (8.5.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (3.5.# ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ (SIM xﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺑﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ .PIN2 xﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺑﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ. xﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (4.5.# xﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ.
ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ. ﻭﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. xﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﻈﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ. xﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﻈﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ. xﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﻈﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ xﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﻈﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1.5.# ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. xﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ :ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺮﻁ. xﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻻﹰ :ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ. ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (4.3.# ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (9.3.# ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ/ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (5.3.# ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (6.3.# ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺳﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (7.3.# ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﹼ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴ ﹼﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1.# ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1.1.# ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ. ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2.1.# ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ) YYYY/MM/DDﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ/ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ/ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ( ،ﻭDD/ ) MM/YYYYﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ/ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ/ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ( ،ﻭMM/DD/ ) YYYYﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ/ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ/ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ( :D) .ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ :M / ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ :Y /ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ( ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (3.1.# ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ.
ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ! ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ .ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ. ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،microSDﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ“ ،ﻭﻧﻔﹼ ﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. .1ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ] .ﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ[ .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺫﻱ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ، ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺫﻱ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ. .3ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ.
ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ :ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IPﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ DNSﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ. ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ :ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IPﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ DNSﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ. ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ GPRS ﻛﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ. ﹺ :- APNﺃﺩﺧﻞ APNﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ .GPRS ﻣﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ :ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ.APN ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ :ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞﺧﺎﺩﻡ .APN ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ :ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IPﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ DNSﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺸﺄ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ GPRSﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ :ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻄﻠﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ. xﻋﺮﺽ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ﻣﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ :ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺧﺎﺩﻡﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻪ )ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ(. ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (3.2.0 xﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. xﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ • ﺍﻻﺳﻢ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ xﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻲ :ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ. ﺍﺳﻤﻲ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ.ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ .LG KF300 ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻲ :ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ. ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2.0 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ. xﻳﺪﻭﻱ :ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻚ .
xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ .KF300ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ“، ﹼ ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ /ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ :ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ .ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ. ﺟﺪﻳﺪ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ”ﺟﺪﻳﺪ“ ،ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ.
ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1.0 ﹼ ﺗﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ. ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ،ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﹼ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ LGﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ،ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ.
ﺗﹸﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ. ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *(3.6. ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ Javaﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *(7.6. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ Java ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ. ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *7. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ. ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *(4.6.
ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *3. ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ URLﻣﺤﺪﺩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺕ[ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *4. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ ﹰ. ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: xﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ :ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﹼ ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. xﻋﺮﺽ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. xﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. xﻧﻤﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ.
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﹼ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻂ .ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﻪ ﹼ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻂ. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *2. ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *1. xﻋﺮﺽ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. xﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. xﺣﺬﻑ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ )ﺑﺮﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ، ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ،ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ. ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﻓﺮﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ. ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ ،ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ، ﹼ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻪ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻮﻓﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﻬﻢ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ. ﺗﻘ ﹼﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴ ﹼﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ. .1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺑﺪﺀ[ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]ﺩﻭﺭﺓ[. ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1.9 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺮ ﹼﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ. .1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺋﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ :ﻣﺮﺓ ،ﻭﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎﹰ، ﻭﺍﻹﺛﻨﻴﻦ~ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻹﺛﻨﻴﻦ~ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ، ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ~ﺍﻷﺣﺪ. .4ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ o ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ .
ﺭﻗﻢ ﺧﺎﺹ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2.8.8 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﻗﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻨﻪ. ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ (SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (3.8.8 ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻚ ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ .ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ،ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ،ﻓﺤ ﹼﺪﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[. 69 2008.8.25 10:27:49 AM .
ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ xﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ. xﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ. xﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. v xﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ. xﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 5.8 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻔﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ، ﻭﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ،ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺫﻛﺮﻯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ .3ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ،ﻓﺤﺪﺩ >ﻓﺎﺭﻍ< ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ[. ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. .
ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1.8 .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. xﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ. .2ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ“. .3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ، ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[.
ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ xﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. xﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ :ﻋ ﹼﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. xﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ :ﻋ ﹼﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ. 65 2008.8.25 10:27:50 AM .
ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ“ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ. ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﻌ ﹼﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ :ﻋﺎﻡ ،ﻭﺻﺎﻣﺖ، ﻭﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ،ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ“ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ/ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ. ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1.X.7 1 .1 ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ. ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2.X.7 ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ.
xﻓﺘﺢ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. xﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ .ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﻫﻮ 59ﺣﺮﻓﺎ ﹰ. ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ! ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: / \ : *?><| ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ :ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ. ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ /ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ :ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ.
ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ xﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ :ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. xﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ :ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ. ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ /ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ :ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ.
xﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ :ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ. xﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. xﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. xﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻒ :ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. xﻓﺮﺯ ﺣﺴﺐ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻢ. xﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ/ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ: ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1.6 ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﹼ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ .ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ”ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ“. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[. xﻋﺮﺽ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. xﺣﺬﻑ :ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ. xﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛـ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ :ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ. ﻣﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ :ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻛﻤﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ. ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (4.0.5 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺆﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (4.3.0.5 xﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﺗﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ POP3ﺃﻭ .IMAP4 ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ POP3ﺃﻭ .IMAP4 ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ .SMTP ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ :ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ. ﻣﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ .SMTP ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ .
ﻃﻠﺐ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ :ﻃﻠﺐ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺭﺳﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﺎﺟﺢ. ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ :ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﻮﻥﺑﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻡ ﻻ. xﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ. ﻃﻠﺐ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ :ﻃﻠﺐ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺭﺳﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﺎﺟﺢ. ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ :ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﻮﻥﺑﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻡ ﻻ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 0.5 ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1.0.5 xﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ :ﻧﺺ ،ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ،ﻭﻓﺎﻛﺲ، ﻭﺗﺼﻔﺢ ،ﻭ ،X.400ﻭﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ،ﻭ ERMES ﻳﹸﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻧﺺ“. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ. ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ. xﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ :ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ.
xﻋﺮﺽ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. xﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ :ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ. xﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ :ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ .SMS ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2.9.5 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 8.5 )ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ( ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ .GSMﻫﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺃﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ ،ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺓ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺪﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ. ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2.8.5 )ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ( ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺿﻔﺘﻬﺎ .
xﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ :ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ. ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 5.5 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ/ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ/ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ/ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ. ﻭﺗﹸﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ. ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. xﻋﺮﺽ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ. xﺣﺬﻑ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ. xﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. xﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ :ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ❈ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ SIM ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ SIMﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ. ﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[. ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. xﻋﺮﺽ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ. xﺭﺩ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ. xﺣﺬﻑ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. xﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
xﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .T9 xﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. xﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ .ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺘﺒﺘﻬﺎ. .3ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ. .4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ .
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ x ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ) :ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺰ x ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻩ ) :ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻧﺰﻻﻕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ x ﺍﺯﺍﻟﺔ ) :ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﻋﻼﻡ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ،ﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ( xﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ :T9ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ/ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ T9ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ. xﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .T9 ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2.1.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﹼ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ،SMSﻭﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ، ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1.1.5 -ﺭﻣﺰ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺣﺮﻑ xﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ :ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ. ﻧﺺ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔﻗﻮﺍﻟﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ .
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﹼ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 5.4 ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ. .1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ”ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ“ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﻓﺘﻜ ﹼﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ. .2ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]ﺗﻮﻗﻒ[ .ﻳﹸﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﹼ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ. xﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. xﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ.
xﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. xﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ/ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ /ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ xﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ. ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ FM ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 4.4 ﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. .1ﹼ .2ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻖ )ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ(. xﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ”ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻵﻥ؟“ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ .
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3.4 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ. xﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ) .ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ/ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ /ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺞ/ﻏﺎﺋﻢ/ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ( .1ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ”ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ“. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮ ﹼﻗﺖ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. xﺍﻋﺎﺩﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ. ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[. .
xﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ/ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( xﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. )ﻫﺎﺗﻒ/ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ( xﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻝ. ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﹴ xﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ :ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ) .ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ/ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ/ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ/ﺳﺎﻟﺐ( xﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ) .ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ/ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ /ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺞ/ﻏﺎﺋﻢ/ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ/ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ( xﻧﻐﻤﻪ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2.4 ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﹼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ .ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ،ﻳﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎﹰ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﹼ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ،ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ.
xﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،Windows 98 SEﺃﻭ ،Windows MEﺃﻭ ،Windows 2000ﺃﻭ .Windows XP ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1.1.4 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ. ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻲ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2.1.4 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺫﻭﻗﻚ. ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ .MP3 ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ .MP3 /ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﺨﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ .
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﹼ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ MP3 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1.4 ﹼ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ. ﻣﺸﻐﻞ MP3 ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ KF300ﻋﻠﻰ ﹼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3 ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ،ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ .ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ،ﻧﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ #ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ. ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 4.3 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3.3 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ. ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺠﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﹼ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﹼ ﺇﻧﺠﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ. .1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺎﹰ ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[. .2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ ،ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ، ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ. .
ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1.3 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﺷﻬﺮ .ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍ ﹰ. ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﹼ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 1 ﻳﻨﻘﻠﻚ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﺍﺀ. 3 ﻳﻨﻘﻠﻚ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ. 5 ﻳﻨﻘﻠﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ. * ﻳﻨﻘﻠﻚ ﺷﻬﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﺍﺀ. # ﻳﻨﻘﻠﻚ ﺷﻬﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ“.
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺗﻚ. ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ .GPRS ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻼﹰ. ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 6.2 ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 7.2 xﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ :ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺗﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ .
ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ) (CLIﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻢ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﻤﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﻠﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ. ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1.2 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ. ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2.
ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ 2ME (Java ) 2 Micro Editionﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ) J2SE (Java 2 Standard Editionﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ“ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3.1 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2.1 ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ“ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ .
ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1.1 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻠﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﻥ ™ Javaﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ .Sun Microsystemsﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺑﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ .Java Applet ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ Java Appletﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ MS Internet Explorerﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ Java MIDletﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ .
6.1ﺻﻮﺭ 8.1ﺑﺤﺚ 6.2ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ 8.2ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ * 2.ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ 6.3ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ 8.3ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ * 3.ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ 6.4ﺃﺧﺮﻯ 8.4ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ * 4.ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ 6.5ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ 8.5ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ * 5.ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ 8.6ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ * 6.ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ .6ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ 8.7ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ * 7.ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ 8.8ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ .0ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .8ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ * .ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ * 1.ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ 0.1ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ .7ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ .
ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ .ﺇﺣﺪﺍﻫﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ. ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ،ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ،ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ .
ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ،ﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺍﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ“ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ. ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺧﺎﺹ“ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ .
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]ﻛﺘﻢ[. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻢ[ .ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻚ ،ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻪ. ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ DTMFﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ DTMFﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻣﺜﻼﹰ، ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ .
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﻣﻠﺔ ،ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﻃﻠﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺘﲔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ sﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ. ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ .
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ .ﻭﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ. ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ؛ ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ.
xﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ xﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ .2ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ Rﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ. ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ .c ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ cﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ .
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ، ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD .2ﻏ ﹼﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ .#ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ T9 ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ T9ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻬﻨﻲ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻐﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ .
xﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ“ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺧﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻐ ﹼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ“. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ. xﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮ ﹼﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ .1ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. .2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ. xﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ cﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ sﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. .4ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ .e ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ .1ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ،s ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. .
ﺇﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ،PIN2ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ،SIMﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﹼ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ 4) PUKﺇﻟﻰ 8ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ( ﺇﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ) PUKﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ (PINﻫﻮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺰ PINﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭ .ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪﻙ ﹼ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ PUKﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIMﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ .
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ oﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ oﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ oﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ”ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ“. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ .ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﹴ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ .ﻻ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺛﻨﺎﺀ. ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ .
xﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﻪ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ،ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻻﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﻪ. .ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ. .5ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺘﺄﻥ. ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﹴ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ microSDﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ،FAT32ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ microSDﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ FAT16ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ. xﺍﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻧﺖ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﻩ ،ﻓﺎﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻬﻴﺌﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ microSD > > ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
.3ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ. ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ! • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ . • ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ،ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤ ﹼﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. • ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ. .
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ! ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ. ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﺎ ﹰ ﺧﺎﺻﺎ ﹰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﻬﺎ. ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪﻙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﹼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺜ ﹼﺒﺘﺔ. .4ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻟﺤﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ. .
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻭﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .2ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺄﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﺮﺗﻬﺎ. ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﹴ .1ﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻻﺝ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. .3ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ .
ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ KF300 ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ KF300 ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻳﹸﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ .GPRS ﻳﹸﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ. ﻳﹸﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ. ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﻋﺎﻡ“ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ“. ﻳﹸﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺼﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺏ. ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ“ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ“. ﻳﹸﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ .GPRS ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ“ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ“.
ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ KF300 ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ .ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ*. ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯﺍ ﹰ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ. ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻬﺎ ،ﻛﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺜﻼﹰ. ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌ ﹼﻴﻨﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ * ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ .
ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ KF300 ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ KF300 ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ microSD ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ 16 2008.8.25 10:27:56 AM .
ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ KF300 .1ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ xﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ )ﻓﺘﺢ( :ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ xﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ( :ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ 1 2 xﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ xﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ :MP3ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ .2ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ/ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ/ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ USB ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ .USB 3 .3ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ .4ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ 4 15 2008.8.
ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ KF300 ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ KF300 4 2 3 .5ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ xﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ: Uﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ :ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ Dﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ Lﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ :ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ Rﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ :ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﹼ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ MP3 xﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ :ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ 1 .1ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﹼﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ xﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ .2ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ xﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ .
ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ KF300 .1ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ .2ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ 1 .3ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ xﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. xﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ :ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ. ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ KF300 ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ 2 .4ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ xﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ :ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ – 0ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺔ – 1ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ 2ﺇﻟﻰ – 9ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ xﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ :ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ .5ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺴﺢ xﻣﺴﺢ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ .
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ .ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ .ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ xﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ .ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. xﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ LGﻓﻘﻂ .
ﺗﺠﻨﹼﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌ ﹼﺮﺿﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ .ﻭﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺄﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺫﻧﻚ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ. ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ .ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ،ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ. xﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ .ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ: ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ. xﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ .ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤ ﹼﺪﺙ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ.
ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ! “ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌ ﹼﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ .ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻛﻔﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺔ ،ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ. xﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ .ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻹﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ. xﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ، ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ. xﻻ ﺗﻌ ﹼﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ.
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ .ﻓﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﺪ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ. ﻭﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )(SAR ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ KF300 ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ.
ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ! • ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ. • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﺩﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺠﻴﺮ. • ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ”ﻓﻘﻂ“ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ”ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ“. • ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺭﻃﺒﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺤﻨﻪ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺎ ﹰ .ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. • ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ .
ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻬﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ KF300 ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ،LG ﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ. ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ. ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ .ﺇﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺮﻳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻨﻮﺡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ.
ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ 84 85 86 ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 83 87 ﻣﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ DTMF ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ 88 ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ PIN ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ 89 ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ 90 91 5 2008.8.25 10:27:57 AM .
ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺤ ﹼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ SIM 70 71 ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ 76 ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 78 ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ GPRS ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (3.2.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ 49 ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ 50 51 52 53 61 62 63 ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ 64 ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ 54 ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻧﺺ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ 60 55 ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 56 ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘ
ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ KF300 6 7 8 13 ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 17 ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ 19 ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻭﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ microSD 20 21 22 ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ 26 ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ 27 ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 30 31 34 ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ
KF300ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ -ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. 2008.8.25 10:27:58 AM .
